2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Patriot
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ⅵ Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
1
injury. Drive carefully.
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ⅵ Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override . . . . . 19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Illuminated Approach — If Equipped . . . . . . . 21
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . 23
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Ⅵ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Ⅵ Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 48
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 52
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 67
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 84
Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
safe place.
position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right
slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunc-
tion occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable.
The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot
be removed until you obtain service.
2
WARNING!
•
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
•
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEYா
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor- bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
2
or unlocked.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro- vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the possible by an authorized dealer.
engine.
CAUTION!
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. that has never been programmed.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
be programmed to any other vehicle.
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys, you can program
new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the
following procedure:
Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Remote
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn grammed during this procedure.
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
first key.
2
do not have a programmed Sentry Key, contact your
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. authorized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
remove the second key.
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
General Information
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
subject to the following conditions:
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
This device must accept any interference that may be To Arm The System
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will
sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance
is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail
lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During
this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are un-
locked in any manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
automatically disarm. After approximately 16 seconds,
the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows
that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming The System
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to your absence, the horn will sound three times and
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle;
2
rearm itself.
however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in
the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter,
once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16 sec-
onds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm
will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and with metal objects.
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
system.
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
following steps:
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
2
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
while still holding the LOCK button.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the strument Panel” for further information.
key removed.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
its previous setting.
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re-
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec- moved.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
mation.
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Programming Additional Transmitters
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Refer to Sentry Key “Customer Key Programming.”
Alarm.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
Using The Panic Alarm
contact your authorized dealer for details.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of proved by the party responsible for compliance could
the system.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Separating Case Halves
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two rubbing alcohol.
halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to
damage the elastomer seal during removal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two How To Use Remote Start
halves together.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the
vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE PANIC button not pressed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle theft alarm not active
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
•
•
•
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
WARNING!
Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
•
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
•
•
•
The hood is opened
The hazard switch is pressed
The transmission is moved out of PARK
The brake pedal is pressed
•
•
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, Vehicle
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
third cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
•
•
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
Any engine warning lamps come on
Low Fuel Light turns on
Start request.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
2
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
•
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s and
front passenger’s door panel. Press this switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key
is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
2
Auto Lock Doors Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock
2 - Lock
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times The doors will unlock automatically if:
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch abled.
to lock the doors.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
programming.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
4. The driver’s door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
NOTE:
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
did not enter the programming mode and you will The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
need to repeat the procedure.
enabled or disabled as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) If
•
Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance
with local laws.
•
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Equipped/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable NOTE:
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
2
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
•
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five times
ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, NOTE:
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature.
2
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which oper-
ate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switch Location
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Window Lockout Switch
LIFTGATE
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window con- To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
trols, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time. turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
2
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors. The central locking/
unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated
from the liftgate key cylinder.
Window Lockout Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed NOTE:
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
•
In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE
transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual
lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the
liftgate open with one fluid motion.
•
Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Opening The Liftgate
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
•
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
•
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
•
Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
•
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
item in a seat — if equipped
buckled up in a rear seat.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
WARNING!
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
their arm.
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
2
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ؆If You Need Assistance؆.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
•
•
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an accident the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best.
2
•
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
2
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Positioning Lap Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
•
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
2
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
2
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a
three-point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which
allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder
belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side
trim panel for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head 5. Sit back in the seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
restraint.
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-
latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connecting Mini-Latch To Buckle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, will withdraw any slack in the belt.
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
under the belt in an accident.
2
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will latch plate.
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
folded webbing.
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
anchor point.
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
First Row
Second Row
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
ALR
2
•
•
N/A — Not Applicable
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
•
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
The seat belts for both front seating positions are Equipped
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
accident. These devices may improve the performance of identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
2
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
worn snugly and positioned properly.
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
2 — Seatback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
into the back decorative plastic half.
(BeltAlertா)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
2
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belt Extender
(8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
notification.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
inflation that are based on the severity and type of protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
collision.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
•
•
•
•
•
Instrument Panel
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
Knee Impact Bolster
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
(SABIC)
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
•
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) — If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
WARNING!
•
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Side Curtain Air Bag Label Location
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
during deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im- tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
2
protection.
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or the other hand, depending on the type and location of
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air severe initial deceleration.
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags — if
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
depending on the severity and type of impact.
type of collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
2
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
especially applies to children.
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
During collisions where the impact is confined to a vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Front And Side Impact Sensors
•
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
2
Unlock the doors automatically.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
ing functions:
the air bag system.
•
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
2
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
You will want to have the air bags ready to related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
inflate for your protection in a collision. The Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
with air bag system electrical components. While the air located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service fuse is good.
the air bag system immediately.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
•
•
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
were buckled/fastened;
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
2
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
crash investigation.
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
2
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
2
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
Driver
CRS Lock CRS Lock
Center
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
First Row
Second Row
N/A
ALR
N/A
ALR
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
ALR
•
•
N/A — Not Applicable
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
WARNING!
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat-
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-
board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible child
seats such that two seats share a common lower anchor-
age. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child re-
straints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing The
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instruc-
tions.
2
Rear Seat LATCH
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
most older vehicles.
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also Installing The Child Restraint System
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
of all of the available attachments provided with your manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
child restraint in any vehicle.
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
and tether straps so that you can attach the hook or have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
connector to the lower and tether anchorages more easily. tions that come with the child restraint system.
The tether strap should be routed over the center of the
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
of the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you push
belts.
2
the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
an accident.
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
CAUTION!
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
2
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
WARNING!
•
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
•
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Defroster
WARNING! (Continued)
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
•
2
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
•
•
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 95
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Folding Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ⅵ Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 150
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Driver’s Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Instrument Panel Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 154 Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ⅵ Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 158
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
3
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 166
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Ⅵ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 171 Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Ⅵ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Glove Compartment And Storage Bin . . . . . . 179
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Ⅵ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 187 Ⅵ Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 189
Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
door trim panel.
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you
are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirror Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the flat outside mirror to center on the adjacent Adjust the convex outside mirror to center on the adja-
lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained cent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view
on the inside mirror.
obtained on the inside mirror.
3
Driver’s Side Mirror Directions
Passenger Side Mirror Directions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Folding Outside Mirrors
The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved,
manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward and normal.
Folding the Outside Mirrors
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
To use the mirror, pull the sun visor down and rotate the Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
mirror cover upward.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
3
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
•
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
or call 1–877–855–8400
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone
button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
“Operation” section.
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone. See the options.
3
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
example, you can use the compound form voice Cancel Command
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
the compound form command into two voice com- you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re- few instances the system will take you back to the
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you previous menu.
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
Voice Command Tree
your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following tions for pairing.
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
pairing instructions:
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
•
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
Dial By Saying A Number
•
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
•
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
•
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will Transfer From Mobile Phone
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
book entry, if desired.
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
3
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
•
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
NOTE:
•
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
•
•
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
•
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
3
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
•
•
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
The selected number will be dialed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Phone Call Features
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
The following features can be accessed through the Currently In Progress
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with mobile phone. Press the
your mobile service provider for the features that you call on hold and answer the incoming call.
button to place the current
3
have.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
Progress
call. Press the
call, press and hold the
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
button to accept the call. To reject the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
button until you hear a single
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to “Conference Call” in this section.
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Call Termination
Call Continuation
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
3
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
NOTE:
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance
not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance:
area.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
button and say
3
NOTE:
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
•
•
turned on,
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
and have network coverage.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
button and say
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
press the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
3
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
−
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you Phone And Network Status Indicators
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to notification to inform you of your phone and network
select that option without having to listen to the rest of status when you are attempting to make a phone call
the voice prompt.
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing able to hear the conversation coming from the other
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile
•
•
Press the
button.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
•
•
Press the
button.
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
audio.
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
•
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
button
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
phone being announced, press the
button and
3
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth Select Another Mobile Phone
connection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using another
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
button at any time while the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
Voice Training
•
•
Press the
button to begin.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
You can also press the
button at any time while the radio mode):
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
•
•
Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
button for five seconds until
Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
3
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
•
press the
button.
Performance is maximized under:
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
smooth road surface,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
•
•
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
smooth road surface,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
•
•
•
fully closed windows,
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
dry weather conditions, and
operation from the driver’s seat.
Read Messages:
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
3
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
•
Press the
button.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
•
•
Press the
button.
6. Why
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
7. I love you
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say 8. Call me
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
9. Call me later
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
button while the
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to. 12. I am on my way
List of Preset Messages:
13. I’ll be late
1. Yes
2. No
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
16. Can this wait?
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
3
Power-Up
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
sages.
system.
•
•
Press the
button.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
zero
Primary
call
Alternate(s)
one
cancel
two
three
four
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
3
five
dial
six
seven
eight
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
home
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Voice Commands
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
Alternate(s)
Primary
Alternate(s)
return or main menu
select
return to main menu
select phone
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
mute
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
mute off
new entry
no
other
voice training
work
yes
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
pairing
phone book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
General Information
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
following conditions:
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
button, listen dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
change commands. This will become helpful once you
mand
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
start to learn the options.
Commands
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
These commands are universal and can be used from any times. Local commands are available if the supported
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon radio mode is active.
the active application.
Changing the Volume
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
a normal speaking volume.
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Radio AM
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for this mode, you may say the following commands:
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
•
•
•
•
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Main Menu
3
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
•
•
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
•
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
•
•
•
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
Memo
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
−
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
•
•
•
“Switch to system setup”
“Change to setup”
“Main menu setup” or
“Switch to setup”
•
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
3
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
−
−
−
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
•
•
•
•
•
“Language English”
“Language French”
“Language Spanish”
“Tutorial”
“Next” (to play the next memo)
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
“Voice Training”
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command
following: speaking the “Barge In” commands.
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
•
“Change to setup”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
WARNING!
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
•
•
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Power Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
3
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
when you have reached the desired position.
located on the center instrument panel area.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system automati-
cally switches to LOW-level heating and turns one indi-
cator light OFF after a maximum of 60 minutes of
continuous operation. It will turn the heater and the
remaining indicator light OFF after an a maximum of
45 minutes of continuous operation. If LOW-level heating
is selected, the system automatically turns the heater and
the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 45 minutes of
continuous operation.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
3
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment Bar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull side of the driver’s seatback. Rotate the lever downward
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
to decrease the lumbar support.
3
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Lumbar Adjustment Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Seatback Recline
WARNING!
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever,
lean forward and release the lever.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Reclining Seat Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Lever
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
WARNING!
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “What To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
downward on the head restraint.
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
3
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
(Continued)
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Folding Rear Seat
WARNING! (Continued)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
3
Rear Head Restraints
The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for information on Tether routing.
Folding Rear Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
Rear Seats Folded Flat
To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the
seatback into its upright position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only with the vehicle is parked.
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.
Hood Release Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
Safety Catch
Hood Prop Rod
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Multifunction Lever
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Multifunction Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights And Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
to turn on the parking lights.
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight
switch is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is
off, and the shift lever is in any position except PARK.
Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on
the headlights.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
Headlight Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
3
Front Fog Lights Control
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
defective.
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Instrument Panel Dimming
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
three times then automatically turn off.
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam. brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is the parking lights or headlights are on.
released.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
Dimmer Control
Map/Reading Lights
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the interior lights were switched on manually or are on
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened because a door is open. To restore interior light operation,
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
second detent.
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
CAUTION!
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Fea-
tures” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
3
Wiper Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever
upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi-
mately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every
second.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed
while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent inter-
val previously selected.
Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe
to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever
up to lock the steering column firmly in place.
3
Mist Control
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control handle is located
on the left side of the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
Tilting Steering Column Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic To Set A Desired Speed
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
vehicle set speed.
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
3
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-)
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be button.
turned off when not in use.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
WARNING!
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
To Vary The Speed Setting
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
To Accelerate For Passing
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
increase until the button is released, then the new set
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
speed will be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle set speed.
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
moderate hills is normal.
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
Control.
ent HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
WARNING!
3
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE:
•
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
release the button.
and then rapidly after Homelink has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
to rapid.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
3
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink button is
pressed.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
follow these steps:
time-out in the same manner.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
ing steps.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button,
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
several seconds of transmission.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
and observe the indicator light.
3
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
•
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink button is
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
pressed.
•
To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
Using HomeLinkா
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
programming, plug it back in at this time.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
•
•
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
General Information
WARNING!
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
•
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Opening Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati- position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
3
will stop the sunroof.
the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
forward again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of open.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Wind Buffeting
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
pressed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any Sunroof Maintenance
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Ignition Off Operation
power outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle other low power devices.
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
3
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
12 Volt Power Outlet
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug
into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the instrument panel for added convenience. This
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet Fuse Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
•
3
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
front of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To
avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
115 Volt Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with great caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
3
•
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are passengers.
two illuminated cupholders located in the front.
Rear Cupholders
Illuminated Front Cupholders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
STORAGE
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on
the release handle.
Glove Compartment And Storage Bin
Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are
an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.
3
Glove Compartment
1 — Upper Storage Bin
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage
areas.
Rear Door Storage
Front Door Storage
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
CONSOLE FEATURES
To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on
The floor console contains both an upper and lower the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart-
storage compartment.
ment and lift the lid open.
To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
open.
3
Lower Storage Compartment
Upper Storage Compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.
Press And Release
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.
3
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Cover
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-
dates the reclining rear seat.
Rear Trim Notches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.
WARNING!
In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Cargo Cover Guides
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Removable Load Floor
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be There are four D-rings installed in the cargo area for
washed with mild soap and water.
securing cargo.
3
Cargo Load Floor
D-Rings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
•
•
•
Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the center portion of the control lever. The
control lever is located on the right side of the steering
column.
3
Fold-Down Speakers
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the Rear Window Defroster
first detent position for rear wiper operation.
The rear window defroster button is located on the
bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
detent to activate the rear washer. The washer defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
pump and the wiper will continue to operate as turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addi-
long as the switch is held (for a maximum of 10 seconds). tional five minutes of operation, press the button a
Upon release, the wiper will continue to cycle two times second time.
before returning to the set position.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned window defroster only when the engine is operating.
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
CAUTION!
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “park”.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
3
•
•
The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the
seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the
siderails to prevent movement. To move the crossbars,
loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of
each crossbar approximately eight turns, then move the
crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars
parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in one of
the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to
lock the crossbar into position.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
CAUTION!
•
To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from
the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the
second detent from the rear of the vehicle.
•
•
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without
crossbars installed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
•
If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear cross-
bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle
when not in use.
•
The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
•
•
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4
Ⅵ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Ⅵ Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Personal Settings
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 219
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Ⅵ Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
Ⅵ Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 224
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 232
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 243
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 234
Ⅵ Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 244
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Ⅵ Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
(Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 274
Ⅵ Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Ⅵ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 277
Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . 277
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 252
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 263
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 263
4
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 264
Ⅵ iPod/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 268
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Controlling The iPod Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet
2 — Demisters
3 — Instrument Cluster
4 — Radio
5 — Storage Bin
9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
10 — Hazard Warning Flasher
11 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
6 — Glove Compartment
7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN 3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
position, the pointer will show the level of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump
symbol points to the side of the vehicle where
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
the fuel door is located.
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on 6. Speedometer
during starting, have the system checked by an autho- Indicates vehicle speed.
rized dealer.
7. Air Bag Warning Light
4. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
chime will sound when this light turns on.
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
4
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated. If the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off.
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
for a defective outside light bulb.
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
9. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward 11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
10. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
is not functioning and that service is required. However, tion.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
12. Tachometer
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine Do In Emergencies” for further information.
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
14. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
4
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
ture gauge to pass H , a continuous chime will occur until
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
the engine is allowed to cool.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop them
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
4
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed. The light will also
turn on for about three seconds when the ignition is first
turned to ON/ RUN.
CAUTION!
17. Temperature Gauge
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Control System is ON.
19. 4WD Indicator Light
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
20. Shift Lever Indicator
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Reset Button
4
Press this button to change the display from odometer to determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B tires.)
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
reset.
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
cluster, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
If Equipped” for further information.
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
23. Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
Vehicle Odometer Messages
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
been driven.
odometer messages will display:
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Ajar
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
CHANgE OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
4
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the in-
strument cluster, warnings such as “Door Ajar”, and
“Gate Ajar” will be displayed in the EVIC display. For
additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center — If Equipped”.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time oil change indicator system (after performing the sched-
the vehicle is started.
uled maintenance), refer to the following procedure:
LoW tirE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will
Do not start the engine.
toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
CHANgE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
in the instrument cluster odometer display for approxi- NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
mately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
24. OFF ROAD Indicator — If Equipped
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD lock
dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless
switch is activated and the shift lever is in LOW or
reset, this message will continue to display each time you
REVERSE position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION!
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. The light will illuminate when
the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the light does not come on when turning the key from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
26. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans-
mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
27. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
28. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol system (ESC) has been turned off by the
driver.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
•
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC 31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
messages.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
30. 4WD! Warning Light
This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)
For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)”.
4
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
system. The light will come on, for a bulb
check, when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as three seconds.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD
system soon.
When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Buttons
RESET Button
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button
located on the steering wheel.
The following displays can be reset or changed:
•
•
Trip A
Trip B
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instru-
ment cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
STEP Button
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func-
tions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Status
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Compass Heading
4
Outside Temperature Display
Trip Computer Functions
Uconnect™ phone Displays (if equipped)
Audio Mode Display
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button to scroll
through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Warn-
ings, Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings)
or to exit sub-menus.
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display one of eight compass readings and the
outside temperature or to exit sub-menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per-
sonal setting in the setup menu.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
•
•
•
•
Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle not in PARK
(automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmission).
downward through the sub-menus.
Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door
is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
4
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
•
•
•
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open
and A single chime )
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
•
•
•
Headlamps or Park Lamps On
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
•
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
Key In Ignition
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Low Tire
Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
Service TPM System
Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If
Equipped
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five within 10 seconds.
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you SELECT button a second time within three seconds of
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not resetting the currently displayed function. Reset ALL will
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
be displayed during this three-second window.
EVIC Functions
Compass/Temperature/Audio
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Average Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Elapsed Time
Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of
eight compass headings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current
radio station.
4
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features).
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Personal Settings
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
the function currently being displayed. Reset will only history information will be erased, and the averaging will
occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed. continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Refer to “Starting And Operating”, “Tire Pressure Moni-
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is toring System (TPMS)” for system operation.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
tank level. This is not resettable.
Elapsed Time
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle in the ON/RUN position.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
hours:minutes:seconds
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
to a text display of ЉLOW FUELЉ. This display will SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
ЉLOW FUELЉ text and a new DTE value will be dis- START.
played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-
tion and the current fuel tank level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Personal Settings
NOTE: Uconnect™ language will not change using the
(Customer-Programmable Features)
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in Uconnect™
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the phone — If Equipped for details.
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Auto Lock Doors
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
“Personal Settings” is displayed in the EVIC then press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
4
the SELECT button.
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Use the SELECT button to display one of the following Auto Unlock On Exit
choices:
When ON is selected, all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened, if the vehicle is
stopped (manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped
and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position (automatic transmission). Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, Francais or NL de-
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RKE Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
Sound Horn with Lock
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected only the driver’s door When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
press to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Re- Lock feature. Press and hold the SELECT button when in
mote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK selection.
button. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this
display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All Doors” appears
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
to make your selection.
Headlamp Off Delay
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Flash Lamps with Lock
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the SELECT
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will button when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the to make your selection.
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
Key Off Power Delay
without the sound horn with lock feature selected. Press
When this feature is selected the power window
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone, power sunroof, and
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press Display Units In
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps system units
“OFF”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make can be changed between English and Metric.
your selection.
Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display
Illuminated Approach
until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears to make your
When this feature is selected the headlights will activate selection.
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
4
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “OFF”,
“30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your
selection.
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Uconnect™ system are confirmed. Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
Automatic Compass Calibration
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in 3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass”
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function displays in the EVIC.
normally.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
an environment free from large metallic objects such as EVIC.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
etc.
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator normally.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in the
EVIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
SEEK Buttons
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio screen.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
stations without stopping until you release it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
4
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for details.
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
will begin to blink.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control TUNE Control
knob to save the time change.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second MUSIC TYPE Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
mid-range tones.
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
4
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Country
Foreign Language
Country
Language
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Information
Jazz
16-Digit Character Display
Program Type
Top 40
16-Digit Character Display
Inform
Jazz
Top 40
Weather
Weather
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
News
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
Talk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
•
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
•
•
•
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
4
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows Audio Language — If Equipped
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the language (effective only if the language is supported by
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save down and selecting Љother.Љ Enter the country code using
changes.
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set Subtitle Language — If Equipped
defaults according to customer preference. Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting Љother.Љ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select Љother.Љ
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ Subtitles — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
number and then push to select.
Off or On.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Audio DRC — If Equipped
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
dynamic range. The default is set to ЉHigh,Љ and under a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
setting is ЉNormal.Љ
customer-preferred settings.
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
AM and FM Buttons
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
4
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU and press and release that button. If a button is not
button on the remote control to select desired title to play. selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in geographic region. These region codes must match in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
twice.
of the player a maximum of five times.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
position to operate the radio.
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
ЉINSERT DISC,Љ insert the CD into the player.
4
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
reading the disc.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
CAUTION!
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
CD currently playing.
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
works in a similar manner.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
•
•
•
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
Maximum number of folders: 100
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
4
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
character extension) as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
character extension)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as Љkeep
disc open after writingЉ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
MPEG
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Specification
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
WMA Specifica- Sampling Fre-
Bit Rate (kbps)
tion
quency (kHz)
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
WMA
44.1 and 48
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
playable files).
4
and play through the vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
timeЉ priority mode. down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
more and radio will display song titles for each file. No function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details.
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
display for five seconds.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” for fur-
ther details.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Dolby
No function.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
ЉDolbyЉ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Macrovision
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
This product incorporates copyright protection technol- limited coverage in Alaska.
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
4
DTS™
ЉDTS™Љ and ЉDTS™ 2.0Љ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi- on or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next to normal display).
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
4
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
type.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type and press and release that button. If a button is not
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Buttons 1 - 6
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
4
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Media Center 130 (RES)
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
TIME Button
Electronic Volume Control
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 and radio frequency.
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Clock Setting Procedure
volume, and to the left decreases it.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
set at the same volume level as last played.
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to save time change.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to pressing the pushbutton twice.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button Buttons 1 - 6
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
CAUTION!
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
4
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
•
•
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
button works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other than
change of pace.
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
•
•
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
character extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
MPEG
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
time to start playing the MP3 files.
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
4
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
Number of files and folders - Loading times will not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
increase with more files and folders audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second tures Of Your Vehicle”.
time to turn off the radio.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Electronic Volume Control
Equipped
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
volume and to the left decreases it.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
will remain tuned to the new station until you make standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
INFO Button
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
SCROLL control knob.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes RW/FF
will begin to blink.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
TUNE Control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
treble tones.
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
16-Digit Character Display
Public
R & B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Jazz
News
News
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalga
Oldies
Personality
Persnlty
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the be stored into pushbutton memory.
4
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
to save time change.
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
position to operate the radio.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
•
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
4
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or file recording media and formats are limited. When
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
works in a similar manner.
tions.
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
change of pace.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
•
•
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
4
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
VBR bit rates.
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
24, 22.05, 16
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
playable files).
4
vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
timeЉ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The come kit that contains general information, including
time of day will display for five seconds (when the how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
ignition is OFF).
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Number (ESN/SID)
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Please have the following information available when
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, calling:
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Number (ESN/SID).
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
limited coverage in Alaska.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Access
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
4
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
on or above the antenna.
ACC position to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek to normal display).
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
RW/FF
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
without stopping until you release it.
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
type.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
4
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
button number will display.
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The NOTE:
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
•
If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod or external USB device support capability.
iPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
•
Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Connecting The iPodா Or External USB Device
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external the vehicle’s iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
which is located in the center console or glove compart- the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
ment.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
4
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
USB/AUX Connector Port
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents. faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external
USB device and display data:
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
Controlling The iPodா Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
•
•
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ЉNext TrackЉ.
To get into the iPod/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once in the iPod/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
•
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
ous and next tracks.
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ЉNext or Previous
TrackЉ.
4
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ЉShuffle ONЉ or
ЉShuffle OffЉ. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
•
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat
OffЉ.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List Or Browse Mode
•
•
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or
external USB device.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
Preset 3 – Albums
Preset 4 – Genres
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
Preset 6 – Podcasts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
•
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
CAUTION!
•
•
Leaving the iPod or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
er’s guidelines.
Placing items on the iPod or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
4
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ.
Uconnect™ phone system.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browse
and played.
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
access the switches.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
4
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLS
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather.
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
4
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
climate controls will not function during Remote Start lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off) denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
position.
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Mode Control (Air Direction)
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
Rotate this control to choose from sev- is a difference in temperature between the upper and
eral patterns of air distribution. You lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
can select either a primary mode as This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
identified by the symbols on the con- cool conditions.
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
Floor
The closer the setting is to a particular
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
symbol, the more air distribution you
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
4
receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
•
The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air NOTE:
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
•
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb- NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
ing the mode control selection.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
•
ECONOMY MODE
Conditioning. A light will illuminate If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
when the Air Conditioning system is OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
4
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer tem-
peratures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
Operation of the system is quite simple.
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
Automatic Temperature Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
•
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE:
4
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Manual Operation
For full automatic operation or for This system offers a full complement of manual override
automatic blower operation, turn the features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
knob to the AUTO position. In manual Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
mode there are seven blower speeds ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
that can be individual selected. In off the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
position the blower will shut off.
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
4
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will put the system in recircu-
lation mode. This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
the control button to illuminate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you Summer Operation
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
Winter Operation
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level and then press
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
suggested control settings for various weather condi- fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
tions.
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but slush, and snow.
rainy or humid weather.
4
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
long periods as fogging may occur.
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Ⅵ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 295
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 296
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Five–Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Ⅵ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 300
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 302
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
5
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or Ϫ29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ⅵ AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Ⅵ Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 309 Ⅵ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Ⅵ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Ⅵ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The
4WD Lock Lever Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . 329
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual
Transmission Or Off-Road Package Only . . . . 330
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 350
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Ⅵ Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 357
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 362
Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 342
Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 349
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
5
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 368
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Ⅵ Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
5
•
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
before shifting to any driving gear.
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
Tip Start
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies” for further information.
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or Ϫ29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
5
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five–Speed Manual Transmission
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
a
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
5
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher
shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the
transmission.
Shift Pattern
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch Recommended Shift Speeds
can result from starting in third gear.
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
Accel-
Engine
Size
eration 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
Rate
Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
All
Engines
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
CAUTION!
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
•
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running.
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis-
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
sion (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
may sometimes ЉfeelЉ as if it is slipping, but this is normal
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and does not harm anything.
and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK
position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift
lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine TRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Some models include a
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
LOW position; in others, manual shifts are made using
the AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+)
while in the DRIVE position (if equipped with
AutoStick) will manually select from a set of predefined
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
transmission gear ratios, and will display the current PARK
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
5
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Shift Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
5
•
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE
CAUTION! (Continued)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully
seated.
WARNING!
•
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
using a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission
overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough
to allow a return to the requested speed. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur,
as before, in a cyclic fashion.
DRIVE
5
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
LOW – IF EQUIPPED
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the trans-
mission will downshift for maximum engine braking,
and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick mode (if
equipped) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICKா
AutoStick operation is activated in the DRIVE position
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more lever to the (+) side will activate AutoStick and shift up
control. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak- to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and operating in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth gear
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift
also provide you with more control during passing, city lever to (-) will activate AutoStick and shift to the next
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, lower manual ratio. After AutoStick is activated, the
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the (+) or (-)
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT) direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio.
and/or the engine from overspeed. Changes down will
only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stall-
AutoStick Is Deactivated:
ing.
•
•
•
By holding the shift lever to (+) momentarily
When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE
Operation
NOTE: AutoStick is not available until the CVT warms
up in cold weather.
When in sixth position, by touching the shift lever to
the right
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
•
When heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) applica- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
tion is detected EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel
drive (4WD).
General Information
•
If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
automatically select the first gear ratio.
•
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select
the next higher ratio.
5
•
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
Four-Wheel Drive Switch
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi-
tional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
traction surfaces, activate the “4WD LOCK” switch by They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
wheels. The “4WD Indicator Light” will come on in the rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed. turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time. type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
The “4WD Indicator Light” will then go out.
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
NOTE: Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting and Op-
erating” for further information.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always Lock Lever Engaged
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in When driving off-road, shift into low (L Off-Road) and
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while activate the 4WD LOCK. This will provide additional
remembering what you are currently driving over.
traction and activates the numerous off-road features to
improve handling and control on slippery or difficult
terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low (L
Off-Road) with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the
engine to operate in a higher power range. This will
allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills, with
improved control and less effort.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
5
NOTE: For maximum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. While the vehicle will operate on
regular fuel when in L Off-Road mode, the engine has
been calibrated for maximum performance using pre-
mium fuel.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
CAUTION!
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore, you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM’s or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use low (L
Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain
your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the
transaxle to low (L Off-Road) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh ЉbiteЉ and help maintain your momen-
tum.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Sand
CAUTION!
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneu-
vers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. You
should use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and ESC turned off. Reduced tire pressure will
drastically improve your traction and handling, while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
tires prior to reducing the pressure.
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
5
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If every- provide a fresh ЉbiteЉ into the surface and will usually
thing looks good and you feel confident, then you should provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as back straight down the grade using engine resistance
you climb the hill.
along with the vehicle brakes.
Driving Up Hill
WARNING!
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade, the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Driving Down Hill
Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight which increases the possibilities of a down-hill slide or
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at
confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you an angle heading slightly up or down.
are in low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged
WARNING!
and proceed with caution. Allow engine and hill descent
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
5
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the down-hill wheels,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some-
thing goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You
want to use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed {3-5 mph (5–8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never
drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight
up or down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man-
ner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water
level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when
determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the transaxle, transfer case,
engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too
fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier
vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can
safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
5
As you approach any type of water you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick.
You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will
not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water
depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
•
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
WARNING!
•
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in NOTE:
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
5
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
5
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
WARNING!
•
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
•
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
•
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
5
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will light.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking per-
formance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
possible.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS is required.
The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
5
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophis-
ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This in-
terference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock brak-
ing capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
You may also experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock mode:
•
the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
•
•
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves
brake pedal pulsations
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Hill Start
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
control in various driving conditions and are commonly benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
referred to as ESC.
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
5
•
•
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this
manual.
WARNING! (Continued)
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
•
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off” Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to “Electronic Stability This system maintains vehicle speed while descending
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will auto-
of the available ESC modes.
matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending
on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle
in “Off-Road” mode and placing the shift lever in LOW
or REVERSE. Refer to “Safe Off-Road Driving” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or roll over may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
When HDC is properly enabled, the “Hill
Decent Control Light” in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only
activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC “Full Off”
mode. This is done by pressing and holding the “ESC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off” button for five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of the manual.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like
normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is
released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi-
nal set speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission Or
Off-Road Package Only
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At
vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no
longer function. If the “HDC Indicator Light” begins to
flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and
the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
HSA Activation Criteria
Disabling/Enabling HSA
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
activate:
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
•
•
•
Vehicle must be stopped.
Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
following steps:
5
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Release the clutch pedal.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condi-
tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times within
20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
additional half-turn to the right.
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis-
abled.
•
•
Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
ESC Operating Modes
WARNING!
The ESC system has three available operating modes for
four-wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available
operating modes for two-wheel drive equipped vehicles.
•
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On
(Two-Wheel Drive Models)
ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or
“ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
5
Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On
(Two-Wheel Drive Models)
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stabil-
ity features of ESC function normally. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pressing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate and the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
“ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer. Press into the PARK position from any other position, and then
and release the Trip Odometer button located on the moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
instrument cluster to clear this message.
the message was previously cleared.
In this mode, ESC is turned off until the vehicle reaches
a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35 mph (56 km/h) the
system returns to “Partial Off” mode, as described above.
When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h)
the ESC system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low
vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road
driving however, ESC function returns to provide the
stability feature at speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will al-
ways be illuminated when ESC is off.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
5
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a NOTE:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
5
•
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ЉRЉ means radial construction
— ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
5
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
•
•
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the left
side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
WARNING!
5
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
WARNING!
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
5
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold smooth, quiet ride.
tire inflation pressures.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- performed.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
checked before using these tire types.
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on “cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
5
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
NOTE:
•
CAUTION!
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
•
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
•
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW
TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres-
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Check TPMS Warnings
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on wheel and tire assembly.
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
with any of the following scenarios:
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low
tire.
5
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will Premium System – If Equipped
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
solid.
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning the proper pressure.
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
The TPMS consists of the following components:
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
•
•
•
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
•
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” text
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
5
Low Tire Pressure Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
“LOW TIRE” text message will no longer be displayed,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Service TPM System Display
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
occur with any of the following scenarios:
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message is displayed.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
The EVIC will also display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”
detected. In this case, the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ
text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure
message is then followed with a graphic display with
flashing will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni- need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will information.
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini-
mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
place of the pressure values.
General Information
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will following conditions:
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare following licenses:
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S18002015B
Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267T-S180015B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, Reformulated Gasoline
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
5
these engines.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
•
•
•
•
•
operate in a lean mode
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
poor engine performance
poor cold start and cold driveability
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
•
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
disconnect and reconnect the battery
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
5
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
•
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
(Continued)
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and Federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could
let impurities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tight-
ened.
(Continued)
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Vehicle Certification Label
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP” the driver’s door B-Pillar.
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
The label contains the following information:
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of Vehicle
5
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Curb Weight
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
GVWR.
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and TRAILER TOWING
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo- In this section you will find safety tips and information
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your hicles used for trailer towing.
5
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the information:
CAUTION!
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its Љloaded and
ready for operationЉ condition.
WARNING!
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Frontal Area
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
5
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
hitches are the most popular on the market today and and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium- Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
sized trailers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
Class II - Medium
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the maximum GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Class III - Heavy Duty
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
2.0L Auto/Man
2.4L Auto/Man
Frontal Area
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
2.4L Auto with Freedom 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
Drive II Off Road
Package (AWL)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side-to-
side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and
trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause
of many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
•
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
5
CAUTION!
WARNING!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always block or ؆chock؆
the trailer wheels.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Towing Requirements – Tires
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
5
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
(Continued)
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
−
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Cooling System
To reduce the potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
−
City Driving
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle
speed.
−
Highway Driving
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Reduce speed.
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
Flat Tow
None
•
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL
Key in ACC
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Front
Rear
All
OK (FWD Only)
NOT ALLOWED
OK
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC
position.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are off the ground.
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing. The only exception is
that FWD (NOT 4WD) automatic transmission
models may be towed with the front wheels raised
on a dolly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Ⅵ Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Ⅵ If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Ⅵ Automatic Transmission Overheating . . . . . . . 391
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Ⅵ Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Ⅵ Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Ⅵ Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
•
•
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
•
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot.
6
If this happens, the transmission overheat in-
dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transmission
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
Jack Location
Spare Tire Removal
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
in the cargo area.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Spare Tire And Jack Stowage
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING! (Continued)
6. Block both the front and rear of the
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
•
•
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
•
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
•
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
•
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Refer to “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information about
the spare tire, it’s use, and operation.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on
each side of the body. The front locations are outlined by
two triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill
flange assembly. The rear location is the same but with
two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with
plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the
jacking locations in the body.
Front Jacking Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6
Rear Jacking Location
4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
For vehicles equipped with plastic trim, the plastic has
been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-
erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened
the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
6
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
1 — Valve Stem
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
6
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
lowered to the ground. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
Air Intake Finger Screws
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Positive Battery Post
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this
Jump-Starting procedure.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Jump-Starting Procedure
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the the reverse sequence:
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
the fuel injection system.
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol or Electronic Stability Control (ESC), turn the system
OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 1st gear
and Reverse (with manual transmission). Using minimal
accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking mo-
tion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
•
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic
transmission) or 1st gear and Reverse (with
manual transmission), do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the shift lever override access cover located
on the right side of the shifter housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine (engine OFF).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, push and
hold the override release lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
Transmission in NEU-
TRAL
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
Front
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
FWD Models ONLY
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
FWD Models ONLY
BEST METHOD
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
With Ignition Key
•
•
FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
Automatic Transmission
FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels OFF the ground).
•
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
•
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles must be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels OFF the ground).
DO NOT flat tow disabled vehicle if condition is
related to the clutch, transmission or driveline. Ad-
ditional damage to the drivetrain could result.
CAUTION!
All Transmissions
6
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed (wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must
be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. Make
certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Manual Transmission
•
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever Without The Ignition Key
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc- Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
PARK position for towing.
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions could result in dam-
age to your vehicle:
•
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position, not in the LOCK/OFF position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Engine Compartment — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Ⅵ Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 417
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
7
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Ⅵ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Automatic Transmission
(CVT) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps . . . 453
▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 441
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD
Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Ⅵ Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Ⅵ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 455
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
7
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ЉclickingЉ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
light off.
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person- The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service services determined by the engineers who designed your
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are vehicle.
available which include detailed service information for
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
attempting any procedure yourself.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
CAUTION!
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-
hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range
will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator
range.
Engine Oil
7
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
CAUTION!
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
Change Engine Oil
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Synthetic Engine Oils
CAUTION!
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be im-
paired by supplemental additives.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filtersfrom your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are
recommended.
a
high quality filter and are
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•
•
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
7
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
•
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
CAUTION!
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING!
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
7
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function. from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
When performing other underhood services, the hood remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
cleaned and lubricated.
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
lock cylinder.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This Adding Washer Fluid
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some Exhaust System
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system system.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
containers.
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
WARNING!
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
•
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
•
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-
tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
7
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
coolant (antifreeze).
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimum
solution of 50% recommended MOPAR Antifreeze/ NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water will require more frequent coolant changes.
should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C) are antici-
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
pated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) recovery bottle.
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
recovery bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
•
•
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
•
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake System
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
7
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
(Continued)
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
7
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If Equipped
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
(CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid which has been formulated with special
metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the
proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Routine fluid level checks are not required. The transmis-
sion filler tube is capped and does not include a dipstick.
Your authorized dealer can check the transmission fluid
level using a special service dipstick. Should you notice
fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, have the fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
level checked immediately. Operation with incorrect Frequency Of Fluid Change
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
7
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom Fluid Level Check
of the hole.
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below
hole.
the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval.
maintenance interval.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Lubricant Selection
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain- passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will Washing
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
•
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
The most common causes of corrosion are:
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
7
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
•
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
•
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
7
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
WARNING!
Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
Cleaning Headlights
mended for leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Glass Surfaces
Instrument Panel Bezels
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module
Integrated Power Module
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Cavity Cartridge
Mini-
Fuse
Description
Fuse
1
2
Empty
Empty
15 Amp AWD/4WD Control
Lt Blue Module – If Equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
3
10 Amp Rear Center Brake
Red Light Switch
10 Amp Ignition Switch/
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module
20 Amp Trailer Tow – If
Yellow Equipped
10
11
12
13
14
20 Amp Power Locks/Interior
Yellow Lighting
15 Amp Power Outlet
Lt Blue
20 Amp 115V AC Inverter – If
Yellow Equipped
20 Amp Cigar Lighter
Yellow
4
Red
5
6
10 Amp Power Mirror/
Red
Steering Control Sat-
ellite Radio/Hands-
Free Phone
10 Amp Instrument Cluster
Red
15
16
40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan
7
7
8
30 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Green
30 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Green
15 Amp Dome Lamp/
Lt Blue Sunroof/Rear Wiper
Motor
9
40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
17
10 Amp Wireless Control
Red
Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
40 Amp
Green
Auto Shutdown Relay
26
27
28
15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay
Lt Blue
20 Amp Radio Amplifiers
Yellow
15 Amp Radio
Lt Blue
10 Amp Airbag Control
Red
Module
10 Amp Airbag Control
Red
Module/Occupant
Classification Module
10 Amp Intrusion Module/
Red
Siren – If Equipped
29
30
31
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
20 Amp Heated Seat – If
Yellow Equipped
10 Amp Heating, AC/
Red Compass
15 Amp Auto Shutdown Relay
Lt Blue
15 Amp Power Sunroof – If
Lt Blue Equipped
10 Amp Headlamp
Red
Washer – If Equipped
Auto Shutdown Relay
32
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp Heated Mirror – If
Red
Equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
33
Mini-
Fuse
10 Amp J1962 Conn/
Red
Description
CAUTION!
•
•
When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Powertrain Control
Module
Antilock BrakeValve
34
35
36
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Antilock Brake Pump
Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass
– If Equipped
37
25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater –
Natural If Equipped
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
battery.
be used for replacement.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
•
•
Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lamp . . . 3757KA
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Assembly
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
License Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamps
Fog Lamps
Refer to the Service Manual or see your authorized dealer
for bulb replacement.
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out
at connector.
3. Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb
by pulling straight back.
Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
4. Twist the bulb to the left.
5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.
7
2. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
3. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the
light from the aperture panel.
4. Twist and remove socket from the light.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Lamps
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.6 Gallons
4.5 Quarts
7.2 Quarts
51.5 Liters
4.26 Liters
6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If MOPAR CVTF+4 Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4 product.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent
non-synthetic product.
MOPAR Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent
non-synthetic product.
MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir
MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4 product.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 460
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
458 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
Based on engine operation condition, the oil change
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
indicator message will illuminate; this means that service
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
•
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
D
U
L
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 459
•
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop For Fuel
N
T
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
N
A
N
C
E
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
At Each Oil Change
N
T
•
•
•
Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
E
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
N
A
N
C
E
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
CAUTION!
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and add as
needed.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
S
C
H
E
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
N
T
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
N
T
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.
❏ Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
N
T
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N
T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter.
❏ Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
N
T
•
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
E
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Ⅵ Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Ⅵ MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 476
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 476
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
9
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426–5337
•
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Authorized dealership name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
a Bell Relay Service operator.
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
MOPARா PARTS
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
dealer, and the manufacturer.
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
Service Manuals
•
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
requirements in addition to these grades.
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
484 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67,70
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 433 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,265
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 424 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 433,454,455
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,427
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,282,426 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,70 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,32
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 282
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,74,86,199 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,296,391
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,67,69,70
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 485
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,440
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,437
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 84
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452,453
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,452
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 454
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 25 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Caps, Filler
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416,423
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,437 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324,327 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,370
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
486 INDEX
Cargo Compartment
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Cleaning
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,244,254
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,277 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Check Engine Light
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Connector
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,77
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . 268
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 487
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,455 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,435 Dipsticks
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Disposal
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434,436
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 433 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,279,280,286 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
488 INDEX
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 158
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 213
Emergency, In Case of
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,370
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,454,455
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416,423
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 71
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 418 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,416 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,85,370
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,429
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 489
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,455 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,455
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,199,453
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 455
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,210,453
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
490 INDEX
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,375
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,373,417 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Gauges
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 152
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,129,366 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210,329
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 491
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 161 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392,394
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
492 INDEX
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,452
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,149
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,74,86,199
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 335
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,210,453
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 209
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18,203
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 205
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,149,151,453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 493
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,298
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 198
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,375
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Locks
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,442
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,442
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 209,418
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
494 INDEX
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421,454
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,454
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419,478
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,67,71 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65,67,70 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,390
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,207 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,479
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 495
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Pretensioners
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 342 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Power
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 173 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,320 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
496 INDEX
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Remote Control
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 275 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,265
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,86
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,82
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 48
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 497
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 289
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,199,453
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350,351,393
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Specifications
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 158,204
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,244,254
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
498 INDEX
Steering
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 203,391
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,320 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Steering Wheel Mounted
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,452 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 342
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,346,481
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 499
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,343
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 357 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,346
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Transaxle
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,296
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,298
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Transmission
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,440
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
500 INDEX
Transmitter Battery Service
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 161 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,373,375
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,452
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,199,453 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Warning Lights
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 196 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 268 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Washer
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 501
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,279,280,286
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,156
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,428
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chrysler Group LLC
12MK74-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
